1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 22 #include <net/codel.h> 23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 24 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 25 26 /** 27 * DOC: Introduction 28 * 29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 32 * drivers. 33 */ 34 35 /** 36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 37 * 38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 43 * tasklet function. 44 * 45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 47 */ 48 49 /** 50 * DOC: Warning 51 * 52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 54 */ 55 56 /** 57 * DOC: Frame format 58 * 59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 62 * hardware. 63 * 64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 65 * 66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 68 * 69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 71 */ 72 73 /** 74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 75 * 76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 80 * 81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 82 * suspend. 83 * 84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 85 * 86 */ 87 88 /** 89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 90 * 91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed 92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness 93 * between different stations/interfaces. 94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead 95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx(). 96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx(). 97 * 98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue 99 * driver operation. 100 * 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 104 * 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 107 * 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op. 111 * 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 116 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 117 * 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 122 * .release_buffered_frames(). 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 126 */ 127 128 struct device; 129 130 /** 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 132 * 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 135 */ 136 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 139 }; 140 141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 142 143 /** 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 149 */ 150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 155 }; 156 157 /** 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 159 * 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 162 * 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 172 */ 173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 174 u16 txop; 175 u16 cw_min; 176 u16 cw_max; 177 u8 aifs; 178 bool acm; 179 bool uapsd; 180 bool mu_edca; 181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 182 }; 183 184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 189 }; 190 191 /** 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 199 */ 200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 206 }; 207 208 /** 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 210 * 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 213 * 214 * @def: the channel definition 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 224 */ 225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 228 229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 230 231 bool radar_enabled; 232 233 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 234 }; 235 236 /** 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 240 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 248 * for changes/removal.) 249 */ 250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 253 }; 254 255 /** 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 257 * 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 261 * done. 262 * 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 266 */ 267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 271 }; 272 273 /** 274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 275 * 276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback 277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed. 278 * 279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 280 * also implies a change in the AID. 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 290 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 304 * changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 309 * context had been assigned. 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 313 * keep alive) changed. 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 322 * status changed. 323 * 324 */ 325 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 326 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 327 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 328 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 330 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 331 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 333 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 334 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 336 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 337 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 338 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 339 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 340 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 341 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 342 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 343 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 344 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 345 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 346 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 347 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 348 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 349 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 350 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 351 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 352 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 353 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 354 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 355 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 356 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 357 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31, 358 359 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 360 }; 361 362 /* 363 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 364 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 365 * filtering will be disabled. 366 */ 367 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 368 369 /** 370 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 371 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 372 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 373 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 374 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 375 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 376 * once each time the timeout triggers. 377 */ 378 enum ieee80211_event_type { 379 RSSI_EVENT, 380 MLME_EVENT, 381 BAR_RX_EVENT, 382 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 383 }; 384 385 /** 386 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 387 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 388 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 389 */ 390 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 391 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 392 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 393 }; 394 395 /** 396 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 397 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 398 */ 399 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 400 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 401 }; 402 403 /** 404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 405 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 406 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 407 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 408 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 409 */ 410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 411 AUTH_EVENT, 412 ASSOC_EVENT, 413 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 414 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 415 }; 416 417 /** 418 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 419 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 420 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 421 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 422 */ 423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 424 MLME_SUCCESS, 425 MLME_DENIED, 426 MLME_TIMEOUT, 427 }; 428 429 /** 430 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 431 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 432 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 433 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 434 */ 435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 436 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 437 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 438 u16 reason; 439 }; 440 441 /** 442 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 443 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 444 * @tid: the tid 445 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 446 */ 447 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 449 u16 tid; 450 u16 ssn; 451 }; 452 453 /** 454 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 455 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 456 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 457 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 458 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 459 * @u:union holding the fields above 460 */ 461 struct ieee80211_event { 462 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 463 union { 464 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 465 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 466 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 467 } u; 468 }; 469 470 /** 471 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 472 * 473 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 474 * 475 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 476 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 477 */ 478 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 479 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 480 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 481 }; 482 483 /** 484 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 485 * 486 * @lci: LCI subelement content 487 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 488 * @lci_len: LCI data length 489 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 490 */ 491 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 492 const u8 *lci; 493 const u8 *civicloc; 494 size_t lci_len; 495 size_t civicloc_len; 496 }; 497 498 /** 499 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 500 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 501 * 502 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 503 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 504 */ 505 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 506 u32 min_interval; 507 u32 max_interval; 508 }; 509 510 /** 511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 512 * 513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 515 * 516 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 517 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK 518 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 519 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 520 * ACK, BACK or both 521 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 522 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 523 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 524 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 525 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 526 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 527 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 528 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 529 * @assoc: association status 530 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS 531 * or not 532 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 533 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 534 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 535 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 536 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 537 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 538 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 539 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 540 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 541 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 542 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 543 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 544 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 545 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 546 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 547 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 548 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 549 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 550 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 551 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 552 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 553 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 554 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 555 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 556 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 557 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 558 * the current band. 559 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 560 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 561 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 562 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 563 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 564 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 565 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 566 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 567 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 568 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 569 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 570 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 571 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 572 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 573 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 574 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 575 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 576 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 577 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 578 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 579 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 580 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 581 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 582 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 583 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 584 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 585 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 586 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 587 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 588 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 589 * your driver/device needs to do. 590 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 591 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 592 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 593 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 594 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 595 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 596 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 597 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 598 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 599 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 600 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 601 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 602 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 603 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 604 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 605 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 606 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 607 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 608 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 609 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 610 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 611 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 612 * station. 613 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 614 * responder functionality. 615 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 616 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 617 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 618 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 619 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 620 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 621 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 622 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 623 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 624 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to 625 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 626 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 627 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 628 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 629 * interval. 630 */ 631 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 632 const u8 *bssid; 633 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 634 bool multi_sta_back_32bit; 635 bool uora_exists; 636 bool ack_enabled; 637 u8 uora_ocw_range; 638 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 639 bool he_support; 640 bool twt_requester; 641 bool twt_responder; 642 bool twt_protected; 643 /* association related data */ 644 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 645 bool ibss_creator; 646 u16 aid; 647 /* erp related data */ 648 bool use_cts_prot; 649 bool use_short_preamble; 650 bool use_short_slot; 651 bool enable_beacon; 652 u8 dtim_period; 653 u16 beacon_int; 654 u16 assoc_capability; 655 u64 sync_tsf; 656 u32 sync_device_ts; 657 u8 sync_dtim_count; 658 u32 basic_rates; 659 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 660 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 661 u16 ht_operation_mode; 662 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 663 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 664 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 665 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 666 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 667 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 668 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 669 int arp_addr_cnt; 670 bool qos; 671 bool idle; 672 bool ps; 673 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 674 size_t ssid_len; 675 bool hidden_ssid; 676 int txpower; 677 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 678 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 679 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 680 u16 max_idle_period; 681 bool protected_keep_alive; 682 bool ftm_responder; 683 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 684 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 685 bool nontransmitted; 686 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 687 u8 bssid_index; 688 u8 bssid_indicator; 689 bool ema_ap; 690 u8 profile_periodicity; 691 struct { 692 u32 params; 693 u16 nss_set; 694 } he_oper; 695 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 696 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 697 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 698 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 699 }; 700 701 /** 702 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 703 * 704 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 705 * 706 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 707 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 708 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 709 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 710 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 711 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 712 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 713 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 714 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 715 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 716 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 717 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 718 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 719 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 720 * station 721 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 722 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 724 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 725 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 726 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 727 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 728 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 729 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 730 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 731 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 732 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 733 * hardware queue. 734 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 735 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 736 * is for the whole aggregation. 737 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 738 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 739 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 740 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 741 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 742 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 743 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 744 * off-channel operation. 745 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 746 * (header conversion) 747 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 748 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 749 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 750 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 752 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 753 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 754 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 755 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 756 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 757 * queue gets full. 758 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 759 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 760 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 761 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 762 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 763 * should kick the MLME state machine. 764 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 765 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 766 * status to user space) 767 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 768 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 769 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 770 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 771 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 772 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 773 * handled properly by the device. 774 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 775 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 776 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 777 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 778 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 779 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 780 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 781 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 782 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 783 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 784 * PS-Poll responses. 785 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 786 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 787 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 788 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 789 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 790 * monitor injection). 791 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 792 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 793 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 794 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 795 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 796 * 797 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 798 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 799 */ 800 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 801 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 802 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 803 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 804 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 805 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 806 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 807 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 808 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 809 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 810 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 811 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 812 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 813 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 814 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 815 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 816 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 817 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 818 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 819 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 820 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 821 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 822 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 823 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 824 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 825 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 826 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 827 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 828 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 829 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 830 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 831 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 832 }; 833 834 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 835 836 /** 837 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 838 * 839 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 840 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 841 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 842 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 843 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 844 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 845 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 846 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 847 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 848 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 849 * it can be sent out. 850 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 851 * has already been assigned to this frame. 852 * 853 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 854 */ 855 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 856 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 857 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 858 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 859 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 860 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 861 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 862 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 863 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 864 }; 865 866 /* 867 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 868 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 869 */ 870 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 871 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 872 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 873 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 874 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 875 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 876 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 877 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 878 879 /** 880 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 881 * Rate Control algorithm. 882 * 883 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 884 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 885 * 886 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 887 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 888 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 889 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 890 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 891 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 892 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 893 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 894 * Greenfield mode. 895 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 896 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 897 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 898 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 899 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 900 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 901 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 902 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 903 */ 904 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 905 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 906 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 907 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 908 909 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 910 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 911 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 912 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 913 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 914 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 915 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 916 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 917 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 918 }; 919 920 921 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 922 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 923 924 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 925 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 926 927 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 928 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 929 930 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 931 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 932 933 /** 934 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 935 * 936 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 937 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 938 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 939 * 940 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 941 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 942 * 943 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 944 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 945 * 946 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 947 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 948 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 949 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 950 * information:: 951 * 952 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 953 * 954 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 955 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 956 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 957 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 958 * information should then contain:: 959 * 960 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 961 * 962 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 963 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 964 */ 965 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 966 s8 idx; 967 u16 count:5, 968 flags:11; 969 } __packed; 970 971 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 972 973 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 974 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 975 { 976 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 977 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 978 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 979 } 980 981 static inline u8 982 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 983 { 984 return rate->idx & 0xF; 985 } 986 987 static inline u8 988 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 989 { 990 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 991 } 992 993 /** 994 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 995 * 996 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 997 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 998 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 999 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1000 * 1001 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1002 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races) 1003 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1004 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 1005 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1006 * @control: union part for control data 1007 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1008 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1009 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1010 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1011 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1012 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1013 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1014 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1015 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1016 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1017 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1018 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1019 * @pad: padding 1020 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1021 * @status: union part for status data 1022 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1023 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1024 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1025 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1026 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1027 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1028 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1029 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid 1030 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1031 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1032 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1033 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1034 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1035 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1036 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1037 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1038 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1039 */ 1040 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1041 /* common information */ 1042 u32 flags; 1043 u32 band:3, 1044 ack_frame_id:13, 1045 hw_queue:4, 1046 tx_time_est:10; 1047 /* 2 free bits */ 1048 1049 union { 1050 struct { 1051 union { 1052 /* rate control */ 1053 struct { 1054 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1055 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1056 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1057 u8 use_rts:1; 1058 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1059 u8 short_preamble:1; 1060 u8 skip_table:1; 1061 /* 2 bytes free */ 1062 }; 1063 /* only needed before rate control */ 1064 unsigned long jiffies; 1065 }; 1066 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1067 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1068 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1069 u32 flags; 1070 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1071 } control; 1072 struct { 1073 u64 cookie; 1074 } ack; 1075 struct { 1076 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1077 s32 ack_signal; 1078 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1079 u8 ampdu_len; 1080 u8 antenna; 1081 u16 tx_time; 1082 bool is_valid_ack_signal; 1083 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)]; 1084 } status; 1085 struct { 1086 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1087 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1088 u8 pad[4]; 1089 1090 void *rate_driver_data[ 1091 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1092 }; 1093 void *driver_data[ 1094 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1095 }; 1096 }; 1097 1098 static inline u16 1099 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1100 { 1101 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1102 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1103 */ 1104 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1105 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1106 } 1107 1108 static inline u16 1109 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1110 { 1111 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1112 } 1113 1114 /** 1115 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1116 * 1117 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1118 * @info: Basic tx status information 1119 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1120 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet 1121 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1122 */ 1123 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1124 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1125 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1126 struct sk_buff *skb; 1127 struct rate_info *rate; 1128 struct list_head *free_list; 1129 }; 1130 1131 /** 1132 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1133 * 1134 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1135 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1136 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1137 * 1138 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1139 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1140 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1141 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1142 */ 1143 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1144 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1145 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1146 const u8 *common_ies; 1147 size_t common_ie_len; 1148 }; 1149 1150 1151 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1152 { 1153 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1154 } 1155 1156 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1157 { 1158 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1159 } 1160 1161 /** 1162 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1163 * 1164 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1165 * 1166 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1167 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1168 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1169 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1170 * 1171 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use 1172 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data 1173 * instead if you need only the less space that allows. 1174 */ 1175 static inline void 1176 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1177 { 1178 int i; 1179 1180 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1181 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1182 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1183 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1184 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1185 /* clear the rate counts */ 1186 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1187 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1188 1189 BUILD_BUG_ON( 1190 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20); 1191 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0, 1192 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) - 1193 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len)); 1194 } 1195 1196 1197 /** 1198 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1199 * 1200 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1201 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1202 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1203 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1204 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1205 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1206 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1207 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1208 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1209 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1210 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1211 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1212 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1213 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1214 * de-duplication by itself. 1215 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1216 * the frame. 1217 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1218 * the frame. 1219 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1220 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1221 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1222 * merging. 1223 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1224 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1225 * (including FCS) was received. 1226 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1227 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1228 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1229 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1230 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1231 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1232 * each A-MPDU 1233 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1234 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1235 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1236 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1237 * on this subframe 1238 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1239 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1240 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1241 * done by the hardware 1242 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1243 * processing it in any regular way. 1244 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1245 * them for sniffing purposes. 1246 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1247 * monitor interfaces. 1248 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1249 * them for sniffing purposes. 1250 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1251 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1252 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1253 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1254 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1255 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1256 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1257 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1258 * interleaved with other frames. 1259 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific 1260 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by 1261 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap. 1262 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1263 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1264 * the first subframe. 1265 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1266 * be done in the hardware. 1267 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1268 * frame 1269 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1270 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1271 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1272 * 1273 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1274 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1275 * - DATA3_CODING 1276 * - DATA5_GI 1277 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1278 * - DATA6_NSTS 1279 * - DATA3_STBC 1280 * 1281 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1282 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1283 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1284 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1285 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1286 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1287 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1288 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1289 */ 1290 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1291 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1292 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1293 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1294 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1295 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1296 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1297 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1298 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1299 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1300 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1301 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1302 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1303 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1304 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1305 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1306 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1307 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1308 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1309 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1310 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1311 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20), 1312 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1313 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1314 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1315 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1316 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1317 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1318 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1319 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1320 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1321 }; 1322 1323 /** 1324 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1325 * 1326 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1327 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1328 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1329 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1330 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1331 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1332 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1333 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1334 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1335 */ 1336 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1337 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1338 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1339 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1340 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1341 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1342 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1343 }; 1344 1345 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1346 1347 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1348 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1349 RX_ENC_HT, 1350 RX_ENC_VHT, 1351 RX_ENC_HE, 1352 }; 1353 1354 /** 1355 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1356 * 1357 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1358 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1359 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1360 * 1361 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1362 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1363 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1364 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1365 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1366 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1367 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1368 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1369 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1370 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1371 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1372 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1373 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1374 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1375 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1376 * values were filled. 1377 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1378 * support dB or unspecified units) 1379 * @antenna: antenna used 1380 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1381 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1382 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only) 1383 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1384 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1385 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1386 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1387 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1388 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1389 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1390 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1391 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1392 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1393 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1394 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1395 */ 1396 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1397 u64 mactime; 1398 u64 boottime_ns; 1399 u32 device_timestamp; 1400 u32 ampdu_reference; 1401 u32 flag; 1402 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1403 u8 enc_flags; 1404 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3; 1405 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1; 1406 u8 rate_idx; 1407 u8 nss; 1408 u8 rx_flags; 1409 u8 band; 1410 u8 antenna; 1411 s8 signal; 1412 u8 chains; 1413 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1414 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1415 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1416 }; 1417 1418 static inline u32 1419 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1420 { 1421 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1422 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1423 } 1424 1425 /** 1426 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information 1427 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace 1428 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more 1429 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that) 1430 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed 1431 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace 1432 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment) 1433 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1! 1434 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI 1435 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace 1436 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done 1437 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the 1438 * @data field. 1439 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that 1440 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd 1441 * length 1442 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data 1443 * 1444 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before 1445 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns 1446 * data. 1447 */ 1448 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap { 1449 u32 present; 1450 u8 align; 1451 u8 oui[3]; 1452 u8 subns; 1453 u8 pad; 1454 u16 len; 1455 u8 data[]; 1456 } __packed; 1457 1458 /** 1459 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1460 * 1461 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1462 * 1463 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1464 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1465 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1466 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1467 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1468 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1469 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1470 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1471 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1472 * for more. 1473 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1474 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1475 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1476 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1477 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1478 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1479 * operating channel. 1480 */ 1481 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1482 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1483 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1484 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1485 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1486 }; 1487 1488 1489 /** 1490 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1491 * 1492 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1493 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1494 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1495 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1496 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1497 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1498 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1499 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1500 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1501 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1502 */ 1503 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1504 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1505 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1506 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1507 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1508 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1509 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1510 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1511 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1512 }; 1513 1514 /** 1515 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1516 * 1517 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1518 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1519 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1520 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1521 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1522 */ 1523 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1524 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1525 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1526 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1527 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1528 1529 /* keep last */ 1530 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1531 }; 1532 1533 /** 1534 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1535 * 1536 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1537 * 1538 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1539 * 1540 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1541 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1542 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1543 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1544 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1545 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1546 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1547 * 1548 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1549 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1550 * 1551 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1552 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1553 * 1554 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1555 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1556 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1557 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1558 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1559 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1560 * 1561 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1562 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1563 * configured for an HT channel. 1564 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1565 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1566 */ 1567 struct ieee80211_conf { 1568 u32 flags; 1569 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1570 1571 u16 listen_interval; 1572 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1573 1574 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1575 1576 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1577 bool radar_enabled; 1578 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1579 }; 1580 1581 /** 1582 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1583 * 1584 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1585 * operation. 1586 * 1587 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1588 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1589 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1590 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1591 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1592 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1593 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1594 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1595 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1596 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1597 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1598 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1599 * channel, expressed in TU. 1600 */ 1601 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1602 u64 timestamp; 1603 u32 device_timestamp; 1604 bool block_tx; 1605 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1606 u8 count; 1607 u32 delay; 1608 }; 1609 1610 /** 1611 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1612 * 1613 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1614 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1615 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1616 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1617 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1618 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1619 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1620 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1621 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1622 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1623 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1624 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1625 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1626 */ 1627 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1628 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1629 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1630 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1631 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1632 }; 1633 1634 1635 /** 1636 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1637 * 1638 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1639 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1640 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1641 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1642 */ 1643 1644 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1645 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1646 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1647 }; 1648 1649 /** 1650 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1651 * 1652 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1653 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1654 * 1655 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1656 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1657 * or the BSS we're associated to 1658 * @addr: address of this interface 1659 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1660 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1661 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 1662 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 1663 * for read access. 1664 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 1665 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1666 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1667 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1668 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1669 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 1670 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 1671 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 1672 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 1673 * restrictions. 1674 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1675 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1676 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 1677 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 1678 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 1679 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 1680 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 1681 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1682 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1683 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1684 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1685 * interface. 1686 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 1687 * for this interface. 1688 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1689 * sizeof(void \*). 1690 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction) 1691 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped, 1692 * protected by fq->lock. 1693 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 1694 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 1695 */ 1696 struct ieee80211_vif { 1697 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1698 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1699 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1700 bool p2p; 1701 bool csa_active; 1702 bool mu_mimo_owner; 1703 1704 u8 cab_queue; 1705 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1706 1707 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1708 1709 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 1710 1711 u32 driver_flags; 1712 u32 offload_flags; 1713 1714 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1715 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1716 #endif 1717 1718 bool probe_req_reg; 1719 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 1720 1721 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1722 1723 /* must be last */ 1724 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1725 }; 1726 1727 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1728 { 1729 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1730 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1731 #endif 1732 return false; 1733 } 1734 1735 /** 1736 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1737 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1738 * 1739 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1740 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1741 * 1742 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1743 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1744 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1745 */ 1746 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1747 1748 /** 1749 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1750 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1751 * 1752 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1753 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1754 * 1755 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1756 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1757 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1758 */ 1759 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1760 1761 /** 1762 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1763 * 1764 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1765 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1766 * 1767 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1768 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1769 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1770 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1771 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1772 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1773 * generation in software. 1774 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1775 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1776 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1777 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1778 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1779 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1780 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1781 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1782 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1783 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1784 * MIC. 1785 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1786 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1787 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1788 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1789 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1790 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1791 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1792 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1793 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1794 * only for management frames (MFP). 1795 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1796 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1797 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1798 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1799 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1800 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1801 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1802 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 1803 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 1804 * generation only 1805 */ 1806 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 1807 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 1808 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 1809 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 1810 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 1811 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 1812 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 1813 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 1814 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 1815 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 1816 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 1817 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 1818 }; 1819 1820 /** 1821 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 1822 * 1823 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 1824 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 1825 * 1826 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 1827 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 1828 * encrypted in hardware. 1829 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 1830 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 1831 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 1832 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 1833 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 1834 * @keylen: key material length 1835 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 1836 * data block: 1837 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 1838 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 1839 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 1840 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 1841 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 1842 */ 1843 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 1844 atomic64_t tx_pn; 1845 u32 cipher; 1846 u8 icv_len; 1847 u8 iv_len; 1848 u8 hw_key_idx; 1849 s8 keyidx; 1850 u16 flags; 1851 u8 keylen; 1852 u8 key[]; 1853 }; 1854 1855 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 1856 1857 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 1858 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 1859 1860 /** 1861 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 1862 * 1863 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 1864 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1865 * reverse order than in packet) 1866 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1867 * reverse order than in packet) 1868 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1869 * reverse order than in packet) 1870 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1871 * reverse order than in packet) 1872 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 1873 */ 1874 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 1875 union { 1876 struct { 1877 u32 iv32; 1878 u16 iv16; 1879 } tkip; 1880 struct { 1881 u8 pn[6]; 1882 } ccmp; 1883 struct { 1884 u8 pn[6]; 1885 } aes_cmac; 1886 struct { 1887 u8 pn[6]; 1888 } aes_gmac; 1889 struct { 1890 u8 pn[6]; 1891 } gcmp; 1892 struct { 1893 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 1894 u8 seq_len; 1895 } hw; 1896 }; 1897 }; 1898 1899 /** 1900 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme 1901 * 1902 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining 1903 * the secure packet crypto handling. 1904 * 1905 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector 1906 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage 1907 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher 1908 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header 1909 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header 1910 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header 1911 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits 1912 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx 1913 * key_idx value calculation: 1914 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift 1915 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes 1916 */ 1917 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme { 1918 u32 cipher; 1919 u16 iftype; 1920 u8 hdr_len; 1921 u8 pn_len; 1922 u8 pn_off; 1923 u8 key_idx_off; 1924 u8 key_idx_mask; 1925 u8 key_idx_shift; 1926 u8 mic_len; 1927 }; 1928 1929 /** 1930 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 1931 * 1932 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 1933 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 1934 * 1935 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 1936 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 1937 */ 1938 enum set_key_cmd { 1939 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 1940 }; 1941 1942 /** 1943 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 1944 * 1945 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 1946 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 1947 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 1948 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 1949 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 1950 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 1951 */ 1952 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 1953 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 1954 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 1955 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 1956 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 1957 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 1958 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 1959 }; 1960 1961 /** 1962 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 1963 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 1964 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 1965 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 1966 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 1967 * (including 80+80 MHz) 1968 * 1969 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 1970 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 1971 */ 1972 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 1973 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 1974 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 1975 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 1976 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 1977 }; 1978 1979 /** 1980 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 1981 * 1982 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 1983 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 1984 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 1985 */ 1986 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 1987 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 1988 struct { 1989 s8 idx; 1990 u8 count; 1991 u8 count_cts; 1992 u8 count_rts; 1993 u16 flags; 1994 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 1995 }; 1996 1997 /** 1998 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 1999 * 2000 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2001 * 2002 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2003 * to the STA. 2004 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2005 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2006 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2007 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2008 * per peer TPC. 2009 */ 2010 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2011 s16 power; 2012 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2013 }; 2014 2015 /** 2016 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2017 * 2018 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2019 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2020 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2021 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2022 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2023 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2024 * 2025 * @addr: MAC address 2026 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2027 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band) 2028 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2029 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2030 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2031 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2032 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2033 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2034 * Can be modified by driver. 2035 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2036 * otherwise always false) 2037 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2038 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2039 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2040 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2041 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2042 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2043 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2044 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2045 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2046 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2047 * the station moves to associated state. 2048 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2049 * @rates: rate control selection table 2050 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2051 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2052 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2053 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2054 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2055 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2056 * unlimited. 2057 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2058 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2059 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2060 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2061 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that 2062 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames 2063 */ 2064 struct ieee80211_sta { 2065 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2066 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2067 u16 aid; 2068 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2069 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2070 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2071 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2072 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2073 bool wme; 2074 u8 uapsd_queues; 2075 u8 max_sp; 2076 u8 rx_nss; 2077 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2078 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2079 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2080 bool tdls; 2081 bool tdls_initiator; 2082 bool mfp; 2083 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2084 2085 /** 2086 * @max_amsdu_len: 2087 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2088 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2089 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2090 * 2091 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2092 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2093 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2094 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2095 * 2096 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2097 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2098 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2099 */ 2100 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2101 bool support_p2p_ps; 2102 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2103 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2104 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2105 2106 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2107 2108 /* must be last */ 2109 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2110 }; 2111 2112 /** 2113 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2114 * 2115 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2116 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2117 * 2118 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2119 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2120 */ 2121 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2122 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2123 }; 2124 2125 /** 2126 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2127 * 2128 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2129 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2130 */ 2131 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2132 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2133 }; 2134 2135 /** 2136 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2137 * 2138 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2139 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2140 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2141 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2142 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2143 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2144 * 2145 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2146 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2147 */ 2148 struct ieee80211_txq { 2149 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2150 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2151 u8 tid; 2152 u8 ac; 2153 2154 /* must be last */ 2155 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2156 }; 2157 2158 /** 2159 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2160 * 2161 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2162 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2163 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2164 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2165 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2166 * 2167 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2168 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2169 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2170 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2171 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2172 * algorithm. 2173 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2174 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2175 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2176 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2177 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2178 * CCK frames. 2179 * 2180 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2181 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2182 * the FCS at the end. 2183 * 2184 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2185 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2186 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2187 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2188 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2189 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2190 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2191 * 2192 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2193 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2194 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2195 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2196 * 2197 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2198 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2199 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2200 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2201 * 2202 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2203 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2204 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2205 * 2206 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2207 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2208 * 2209 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2210 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2211 * 2212 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2213 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2214 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2215 * 2216 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2217 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2218 * 2219 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2220 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2221 * 2222 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2223 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2224 * the stack. 2225 * 2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2227 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2228 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2229 * 2230 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2231 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2232 * dtim_period). 2233 * 2234 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2235 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2236 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2237 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2238 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2239 * only in that case. 2240 * 2241 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2242 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2243 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2244 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2245 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2246 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2247 * 2248 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2249 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2250 * software. 2251 * 2252 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2253 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2254 * active interfaces. 2255 * 2256 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2257 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2258 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2259 * 2260 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2261 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2262 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2263 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2264 * supported cipher suites. 2265 * 2266 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2267 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2268 * for frames. 2269 * 2270 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2271 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2272 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2273 * control for more details. 2274 * 2275 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2276 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2277 * 2278 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2279 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2280 * is supported. 2281 * 2282 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2283 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2284 * 2285 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2286 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2287 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2288 * 2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2290 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2291 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2292 * CSA frame. 2293 * 2294 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2295 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2296 * 2297 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2298 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2299 * 2300 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2301 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2302 * 2303 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2304 * within A-MPDU. 2305 * 2306 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2307 * for sent beacons. 2308 * 2309 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2310 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2311 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2312 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2313 * 2314 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2315 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2316 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2317 * timeout. 2318 * 2319 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2320 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2321 * 2322 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2323 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2324 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2325 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2326 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2327 * 2328 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2329 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2330 * 2331 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2332 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2333 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2334 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2335 * 2336 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2337 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2338 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2339 * 2340 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2341 * TDLS links. 2342 * 2343 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2344 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2345 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2346 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2347 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2348 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2349 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2350 * 2351 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2352 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2353 * 2354 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2355 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2356 * 2357 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2358 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2359 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2360 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2361 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2362 * 2363 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2364 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2365 * TXQs to start with. 2366 * 2367 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2368 * length in tx status information 2369 * 2370 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2371 * 2372 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2373 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2374 * 2375 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2376 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2377 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2378 * 2379 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2380 * offload 2381 * 2382 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2383 */ 2384 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2385 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2386 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2387 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2388 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2389 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2390 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2391 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2392 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2393 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2394 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2395 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2396 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2397 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2398 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2399 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2400 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2401 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2402 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2403 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2404 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2405 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2406 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2407 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2408 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2409 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2410 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2411 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2412 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2413 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2414 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2415 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2416 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2417 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2418 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2419 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2420 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2421 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2422 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2423 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2424 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2425 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2426 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2427 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2428 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2429 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2430 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2431 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2432 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2433 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2434 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2435 2436 /* keep last, obviously */ 2437 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2438 }; 2439 2440 /** 2441 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2442 * 2443 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2444 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2445 * 2446 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2447 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2448 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2449 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2450 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2451 * 2452 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2453 * 2454 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2455 * along with this structure. 2456 * 2457 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2458 * 2459 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2460 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2461 * 2462 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2463 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2464 * 2465 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2466 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2467 * 2468 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2469 * that HW supports 2470 * 2471 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2472 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2473 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2474 * 2475 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2476 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2477 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2478 * 2479 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2480 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2481 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2482 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2483 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2484 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2485 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2486 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2487 * 2488 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2489 * can handle. 2490 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2491 * the hw can report back. 2492 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2493 * 2494 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2495 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2496 * aggregation. 2497 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2498 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2499 * it shouldn't be set. 2500 * 2501 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2502 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2503 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2504 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2505 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2506 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2507 * 2508 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2509 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2510 * 2511 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2512 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2513 * 2514 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2515 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2516 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2517 * adding _BW is supported today. 2518 * 2519 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2520 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2521 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2522 * 2523 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2524 * 2525 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2526 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2527 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2528 * device_timestamp. 2529 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2530 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2531 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2532 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2533 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2534 * 2535 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2536 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2537 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2538 * 2539 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2540 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2541 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2542 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2543 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2544 * neither enabled. 2545 * 2546 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2547 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2548 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2549 * 2550 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions. 2551 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions 2552 * supported by HW. 2553 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2554 * device. 2555 * 2556 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2557 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2558 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2559 * 2560 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2561 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2562 * 2563 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2564 */ 2565 struct ieee80211_hw { 2566 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2567 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2568 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2569 void *priv; 2570 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2571 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2572 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2573 int vif_data_size; 2574 int sta_data_size; 2575 int chanctx_data_size; 2576 int txq_data_size; 2577 u16 queues; 2578 u16 max_listen_interval; 2579 s8 max_signal; 2580 u8 max_rates; 2581 u8 max_report_rates; 2582 u8 max_rate_tries; 2583 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2584 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2585 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2586 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2587 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2588 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2589 struct { 2590 int units_pos; 2591 s16 accuracy; 2592 } radiotap_timestamp; 2593 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2594 u8 uapsd_queues; 2595 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2596 u8 n_cipher_schemes; 2597 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes; 2598 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2599 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2600 u8 weight_multiplier; 2601 u32 max_mtu; 2602 }; 2603 2604 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2605 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2606 { 2607 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2608 } 2609 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2610 2611 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2612 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2613 { 2614 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2615 } 2616 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2617 2618 /** 2619 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2620 * 2621 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2622 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2623 */ 2624 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2625 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2626 2627 /* Keep last */ 2628 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2629 }; 2630 2631 /** 2632 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2633 * 2634 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2635 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2636 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2637 * @status: channel-switch response status 2638 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2639 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2640 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2641 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2642 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2643 */ 2644 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2645 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2646 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2647 u8 action_code; 2648 u32 status; 2649 u32 timestamp; 2650 u16 switch_time; 2651 u16 switch_timeout; 2652 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2653 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2654 }; 2655 2656 /** 2657 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2658 * 2659 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2660 * 2661 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2662 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2663 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2664 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2665 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2666 * 2667 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2668 */ 2669 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2670 2671 /** 2672 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2673 * 2674 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2675 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2676 */ 2677 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2678 { 2679 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2680 } 2681 2682 /** 2683 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2684 * 2685 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2686 * @addr: the address to set 2687 */ 2688 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2689 { 2690 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2691 } 2692 2693 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2694 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2695 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2696 { 2697 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2698 return NULL; 2699 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2700 } 2701 2702 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2703 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2704 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2705 { 2706 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2707 return NULL; 2708 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2709 } 2710 2711 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2712 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2713 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2714 { 2715 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2716 return NULL; 2717 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2718 } 2719 2720 /** 2721 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2722 * @hw: the hardware 2723 * @skb: the skb 2724 * 2725 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 2726 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 2727 */ 2728 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 2729 2730 /** 2731 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 2732 * 2733 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 2734 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 2735 * 2736 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 2737 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 2738 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 2739 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 2740 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 2741 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 2742 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 2743 * 2744 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 2745 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 2746 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 2747 * 2748 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 2749 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 2750 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 2751 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 2752 * 2753 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 2754 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 2755 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 2756 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 2757 * 2758 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 2759 * 2760 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 2761 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 2762 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 2763 * based on the receive flags. 2764 * 2765 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 2766 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 2767 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 2768 * keys. 2769 * 2770 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 2771 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 2772 * handler. 2773 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 2774 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 2775 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 2776 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 2777 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 2778 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 2779 * 2780 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 2781 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 2782 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 2783 * 2784 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 2785 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 2786 * requirements: 2787 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to 2788 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been 2789 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key, 2790 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 2791 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 2792 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 2793 encrypted with the new key and 2794 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 2795 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 2796 */ 2797 2798 /** 2799 * DOC: Powersave support 2800 * 2801 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 2802 * 2803 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 2804 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 2805 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 2806 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 2807 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 2808 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 2809 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 2810 * it finds traffic directed to it. 2811 * 2812 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 2813 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 2814 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 2815 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 2816 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 2817 * 2818 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 2819 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 2820 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 2821 * 2822 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 2823 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 2824 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 2825 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 2826 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 2827 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 2828 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 2829 * 2830 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 2831 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 2832 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 2833 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 2834 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 2835 * periods. 2836 * 2837 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 2838 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 2839 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 2840 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 2841 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 2842 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 2843 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 2844 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 2845 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 2846 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 2847 * 2848 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 2849 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 2850 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 2851 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 2852 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 2853 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 2854 * 2855 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 2856 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 2857 */ 2858 2859 /** 2860 * DOC: Beacon filter support 2861 * 2862 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 2863 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 2864 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 2865 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 2866 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 2867 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 2868 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 2869 * 2870 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 2871 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 2872 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 2873 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 2874 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 2875 * 2876 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 2877 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 2878 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 2879 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 2880 * 2881 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 2882 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 2883 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 2884 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 2885 * 2886 * - a list of information element IDs 2887 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 2888 * 2889 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 2890 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 2891 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 2892 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 2893 * vendor information elements. 2894 * 2895 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 2896 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 2897 * 2898 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 2899 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 2900 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 2901 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 2902 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 2903 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 2904 * 2905 * 2906 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 2907 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 2908 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 2909 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 2910 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 2911 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 2912 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 2913 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 2914 * 2915 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 2916 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 2917 * signal strength threshold checking. 2918 */ 2919 2920 /** 2921 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 2922 * 2923 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 2924 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 2925 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 2926 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 2927 * 2928 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 2929 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 2930 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 2931 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 2932 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 2933 * hardware flags. 2934 * 2935 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 2936 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 2937 * turned off otherwise. 2938 * 2939 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 2940 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 2941 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 2942 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 2943 */ 2944 2945 /** 2946 * DOC: Frame filtering 2947 * 2948 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 2949 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 2950 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 2951 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 2952 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 2953 * 2954 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 2955 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 2956 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 2957 * 2958 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 2959 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 2960 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 2961 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 2962 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 2963 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 2964 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 2965 * 2966 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 2967 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 2968 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 2969 * or dropped. 2970 * 2971 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 2972 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 2973 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 2974 * the flag, but not clear it. 2975 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 2976 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 2977 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 2978 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 2979 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 2980 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 2981 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 2982 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 2983 */ 2984 2985 /** 2986 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 2987 * 2988 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 2989 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 2990 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 2991 * 2992 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 2993 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 2994 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 2995 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 2996 * the driver code. 2997 * 2998 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 2999 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3000 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3001 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3002 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3003 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3004 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3005 * 3006 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3007 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3008 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3009 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3010 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3011 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3012 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3013 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3014 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3015 * @sta_notify callback. 3016 * 3017 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3018 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3019 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3020 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3021 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3022 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3023 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3024 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3025 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3026 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3027 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3028 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3029 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3030 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3031 * 3032 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3033 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3034 * 3035 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3036 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3037 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3038 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3039 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3040 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3041 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3042 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3043 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3044 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3045 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3046 * 3047 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3048 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3049 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3050 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3051 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3052 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3053 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3054 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3055 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3056 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 3057 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3058 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3059 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3060 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3061 * 3062 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3063 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3064 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3065 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3066 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3067 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3068 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3069 * 3070 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3071 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3072 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3073 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3074 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3075 * 3076 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3077 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3078 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3079 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3080 */ 3081 3082 /** 3083 * DOC: HW queue control 3084 * 3085 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3086 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3087 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3088 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3089 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3090 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3091 * 3092 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3093 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3094 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3095 * 3096 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3097 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3098 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3099 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3100 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3101 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3102 * the hardware queue. 3103 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3104 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3105 * 3106 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3107 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3108 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3109 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3110 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3111 * 3112 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3113 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3114 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3115 * off-channel queue: 9 3116 * 3117 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3118 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3119 * 3120 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3121 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3122 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3123 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3124 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3125 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3126 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3127 * 3128 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3129 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3130 * 3131 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3132 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3133 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3134 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3135 */ 3136 3137 /** 3138 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3139 * 3140 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3141 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3142 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3143 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3144 * 3145 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3146 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3147 * multicast address. 3148 * 3149 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3150 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3151 * 3152 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3153 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3154 * 3155 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3156 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3157 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3158 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3159 * honour this flag if possible. 3160 * 3161 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3162 * station 3163 * 3164 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3165 * 3166 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3167 * 3168 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3169 * 3170 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3171 */ 3172 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3173 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3174 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3175 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3176 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3177 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3178 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3179 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3180 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3181 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3182 }; 3183 3184 /** 3185 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3186 * 3187 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3188 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3189 * 3190 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3191 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3192 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3193 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3194 * 3195 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3196 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3197 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3198 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3199 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3200 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3201 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3202 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3203 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3204 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3205 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3206 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3207 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3208 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3209 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3210 * session is gone and removes the station. 3211 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3212 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3213 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3214 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3215 */ 3216 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3217 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3218 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3219 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3220 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3221 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3222 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3223 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3224 }; 3225 3226 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3227 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3228 3229 /** 3230 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3231 * 3232 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3233 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3234 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3235 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3236 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3237 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3238 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3239 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3240 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3241 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3242 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3243 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3244 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3245 */ 3246 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3247 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3248 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3249 u16 tid; 3250 u16 ssn; 3251 u16 buf_size; 3252 bool amsdu; 3253 u16 timeout; 3254 }; 3255 3256 /** 3257 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3258 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3259 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3260 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3261 */ 3262 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3263 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3264 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3265 }; 3266 3267 /** 3268 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3269 * 3270 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3271 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3272 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3273 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3274 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3275 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3276 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3277 * the peer. 3278 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3279 * by the peer 3280 */ 3281 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3282 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3283 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3284 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3285 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3286 }; 3287 3288 /** 3289 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3290 * 3291 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3292 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3293 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3294 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3295 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3296 * 3297 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3298 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3299 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3300 */ 3301 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3302 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3303 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3304 }; 3305 3306 /** 3307 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type 3308 * 3309 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3310 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3311 * 3312 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3313 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3314 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3315 * of wowlan configuration) 3316 */ 3317 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3318 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3319 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3320 }; 3321 3322 /** 3323 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3324 * 3325 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3326 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3327 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3328 * 3329 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3330 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3331 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3332 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3333 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3334 * Must be atomic. 3335 * 3336 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3337 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3338 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3339 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3340 * or zero. 3341 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3342 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3343 * is added. 3344 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3345 * 3346 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3347 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3348 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3349 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3350 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3351 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3352 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3353 * 3354 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3355 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3356 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3357 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3358 * reconfigured at resume time. 3359 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3360 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3361 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3362 * must return 1 from this function. 3363 * 3364 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3365 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3366 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3367 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3368 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3369 * 3370 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3371 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3372 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3373 * in suspend(). 3374 * 3375 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3376 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3377 * and @stop must be implemented. 3378 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3379 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3380 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3381 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3382 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3383 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3384 * 3385 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3386 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3387 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3388 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3389 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3390 * 3391 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3392 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3393 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3394 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3395 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3396 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3397 * MAC address of the device going away. 3398 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3399 * 3400 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3401 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3402 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3403 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3404 * 3405 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3406 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3407 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3408 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3409 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3410 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3411 * can sleep. 3412 * 3413 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3414 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3415 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3416 * 3417 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3418 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3419 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3420 * 3421 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3422 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3423 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3424 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3425 * which flags are changed. 3426 * This callback can sleep. 3427 * 3428 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3429 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3430 * 3431 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3432 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3433 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3434 * is enabled. 3435 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3436 * The callback can sleep. 3437 * 3438 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3439 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3440 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3441 * The callback must be atomic. 3442 * 3443 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3444 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3445 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3446 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3447 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3448 * 3449 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3450 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3451 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3452 * 3453 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3454 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3455 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3456 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3457 * that power save is disabled. 3458 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3459 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3460 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3461 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3462 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3463 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3464 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3465 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3466 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3467 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3468 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3469 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3470 * The callback can sleep. 3471 * 3472 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3473 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3474 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3475 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3476 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3477 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3478 * The callback can sleep. 3479 * 3480 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3481 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3482 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3483 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3484 * 3485 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3486 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3487 * 3488 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3489 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3490 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3491 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3492 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3493 * 3494 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3495 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3496 * this notification. 3497 * The callback can sleep. 3498 * 3499 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3500 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3501 * The callback can sleep. 3502 * 3503 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3504 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3505 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3506 * The callback must be atomic. 3507 * 3508 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3509 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3510 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3511 * should be set as well. 3512 * The callback can sleep. 3513 * 3514 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3515 * The callback can sleep. 3516 * 3517 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3518 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3519 * 3520 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3521 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3522 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3523 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3524 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3525 * This callback can sleep. 3526 * 3527 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3528 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3529 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3530 * callback can sleep. 3531 * 3532 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3533 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3534 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3535 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3536 * 3537 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3538 * power for the station. 3539 * This callback can sleep. 3540 * 3541 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3542 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3543 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3544 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3545 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3546 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3547 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3548 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3549 * The callback can sleep. 3550 * 3551 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3552 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3553 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3554 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3555 * in @sta_state. 3556 * The callback can sleep. 3557 * 3558 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3559 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3560 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3561 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3562 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3563 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3564 * Must be atomic. 3565 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3566 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3567 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3568 * 3569 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3570 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3571 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3572 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3573 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3574 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3575 * The callback can sleep. 3576 * 3577 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3578 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3579 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3580 * The callback can sleep. 3581 * 3582 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3583 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3584 * required function. 3585 * The callback can sleep. 3586 * 3587 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3588 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3589 * required function. 3590 * The callback can sleep. 3591 * 3592 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3593 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3594 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3595 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3596 * The callback can sleep. 3597 * 3598 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3599 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3600 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3601 * TSF synchronization. 3602 * The callback can sleep. 3603 * 3604 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3605 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3606 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3607 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3608 * The callback can sleep. 3609 * 3610 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3611 * 3612 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3613 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3614 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3615 * The callback can sleep. 3616 * 3617 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3618 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3619 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3620 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3621 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3622 * 3623 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3624 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3625 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3626 * 3627 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3628 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3629 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3630 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3631 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3632 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3633 * The callback can sleep. 3634 * 3635 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3636 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3637 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3638 * completion of the channel switch. 3639 * 3640 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3641 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3642 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3643 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3644 * 3645 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3646 * 3647 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3648 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3649 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3650 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3651 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3652 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3653 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3654 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3655 * must be accepted in this case. 3656 * This callback may sleep. 3657 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3658 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3659 * 3660 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3661 * 3662 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3663 * 3664 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3665 * queues before entering power save. 3666 * 3667 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3668 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3669 * The callback can sleep. 3670 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3671 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3672 * The callback must be atomic. 3673 * 3674 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3675 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3676 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3677 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 3678 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 3679 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 3680 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 3681 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 3682 * more-data bit must always be set. 3683 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 3684 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 3685 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 3686 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 3687 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3688 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 3689 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 3690 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 3691 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 3692 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 3693 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 3694 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 3695 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 3696 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 3697 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 3698 * This callback must be atomic. 3699 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 3700 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 3701 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 3702 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 3703 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 3704 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 3705 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3706 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 3707 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 3708 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 3709 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 3710 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 3711 * This callback must be atomic. 3712 * 3713 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 3714 * 3715 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 3716 * 3717 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 3718 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 3719 * 3720 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 3721 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 3722 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 3723 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 3724 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 3725 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 3726 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 3727 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 3728 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 3729 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 3730 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 3731 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 3732 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 3733 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 3734 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the 3735 * duration for which the operation is requested. 3736 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 3737 * 3738 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 3739 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 3740 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 3741 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 3742 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 3743 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 3744 * 2 * (DTIM period). 3745 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 3746 * 3747 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 3748 * This callback may sleep. 3749 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 3750 * This callback may sleep. 3751 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 3752 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 3753 * channel context with different settings 3754 * This callback may sleep. 3755 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 3756 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 3757 * This callback may sleep. 3758 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 3759 * unbound from vif. 3760 * This callback may sleep. 3761 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 3762 * another, as specified in the list of 3763 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 3764 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 3765 * This callback may sleep. 3766 * 3767 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 3768 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 3769 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 3770 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 3771 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 3772 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 3773 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 3774 * 3775 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 3776 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 3777 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 3778 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 3779 * This callback may sleep. 3780 * 3781 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 3782 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 3783 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 3784 * 3785 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 3786 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 3787 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 3788 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 3789 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 3790 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 3791 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 3792 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 3793 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 3794 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 3795 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3796 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 3797 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 3798 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 3799 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3800 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 3801 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3802 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3803 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 3804 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3805 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 3806 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 3807 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 3808 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 3809 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 3810 * channel context is bound before this is called. 3811 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 3812 * 3813 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 3814 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 3815 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 3816 * 3817 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 3818 * and hardware limits. 3819 * 3820 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 3821 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 3822 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 3823 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 3824 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 3825 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 3826 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 3827 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 3828 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 3829 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 3830 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 3831 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 3832 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 3833 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 3834 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 3835 * the function call. 3836 * 3837 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 3838 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 3839 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 3840 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 3841 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 3842 * 3843 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 3844 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 3845 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 3846 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 3847 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 3848 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 3849 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 3850 * changed parameters. 3851 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 3852 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 3853 * this call. 3854 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 3855 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 3856 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 3857 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 3858 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 3859 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 3860 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 3861 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 3862 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 3863 * 3864 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 3865 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 3866 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 3867 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 3868 * This callback may sleep. 3869 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 3870 * This callback may sleep. 3871 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 3872 * 4-address mode 3873 */ 3874 struct ieee80211_ops { 3875 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3876 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 3877 struct sk_buff *skb); 3878 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3879 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3880 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 3881 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 3882 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3883 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 3884 #endif 3885 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3886 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3887 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3888 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3889 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 3890 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3891 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3892 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 3893 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3894 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3895 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 3896 u32 changed); 3897 3898 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3899 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3900 3901 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3902 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 3903 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3904 unsigned int changed_flags, 3905 unsigned int *total_flags, 3906 u64 multicast); 3907 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3908 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3909 unsigned int filter_flags, 3910 unsigned int changed_flags); 3911 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3912 bool set); 3913 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 3914 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3915 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 3916 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3917 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3918 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 3919 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3920 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 3921 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3922 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3923 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 3924 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3925 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 3926 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3927 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 3928 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3929 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3930 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3931 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3932 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 3933 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 3934 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3935 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3936 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3937 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3938 const u8 *mac_addr); 3939 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3940 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3941 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3942 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 3943 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3944 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 3945 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 3946 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3947 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3948 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3949 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3950 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3951 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3952 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 3953 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3954 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3955 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3956 struct dentry *dir); 3957 #endif 3958 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3959 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3960 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3961 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3962 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3963 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3964 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3965 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 3966 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 3967 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3968 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3969 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3970 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3971 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3972 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3973 u32 changed); 3974 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3975 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3976 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3977 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3978 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3979 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3980 struct station_info *sinfo); 3981 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3982 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac, 3983 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 3984 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3985 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3986 u64 tsf); 3987 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3988 s64 offset); 3989 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3990 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3991 3992 /** 3993 * @ampdu_action: 3994 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 3995 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 3996 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 3997 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3998 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 3999 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4000 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4001 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4002 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4003 * 4004 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4005 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4006 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4007 * 4008 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4009 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4010 * 4011 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4012 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4013 * - ``TX: 81`` 4014 * 4015 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4016 * 4017 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4018 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4019 * if the session can start immediately. 4020 * 4021 * The callback can sleep. 4022 */ 4023 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4024 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4025 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4026 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4027 struct survey_info *survey); 4028 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4029 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4030 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4031 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4032 void *data, int len); 4033 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4034 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4035 void *data, int len); 4036 #endif 4037 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4038 u32 queues, bool drop); 4039 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4040 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4041 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4042 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4043 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4044 4045 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4046 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4047 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4048 int duration, 4049 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4050 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4051 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4052 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4053 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4054 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4055 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4056 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4057 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4058 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4059 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4060 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4061 4062 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4063 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4064 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4065 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4066 bool more_data); 4067 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4068 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4069 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4070 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4071 bool more_data); 4072 4073 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4074 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4075 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4076 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4077 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4078 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4079 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4080 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4081 4082 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4083 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4084 u16 duration); 4085 4086 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4087 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4088 4089 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4090 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4091 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4092 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4093 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4094 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4095 u32 changed); 4096 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4097 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4098 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4099 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4100 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4101 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4102 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4103 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4104 int n_vifs, 4105 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4106 4107 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4108 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4109 4110 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4111 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4112 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4113 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4114 #endif 4115 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4116 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4117 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4118 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4119 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4120 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4121 4122 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4123 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4124 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4125 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4126 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4127 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4128 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4129 4130 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4131 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4132 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4133 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4134 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4135 int *dbm); 4136 4137 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4138 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4139 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4140 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4141 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4142 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4143 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4144 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4145 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4146 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4147 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4148 4149 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4150 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4151 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4152 4153 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4154 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4155 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4156 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4157 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4158 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4159 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4160 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4161 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4162 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4163 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4164 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4165 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4166 u8 instance_id); 4167 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4168 struct sk_buff *head, 4169 struct sk_buff *skb); 4170 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4171 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4172 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4173 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4174 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4175 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4176 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4177 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4179 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4180 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4181 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4182 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4183 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4184 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4185 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4186 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4187 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4188 }; 4189 4190 /** 4191 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4192 * 4193 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4194 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4195 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4196 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4197 * @priv_data_len. 4198 * 4199 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4200 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4201 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4202 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4203 * 4204 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4205 */ 4206 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4207 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4208 const char *requested_name); 4209 4210 /** 4211 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4212 * 4213 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4214 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4215 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4216 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4217 * @priv_data_len. 4218 * 4219 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4220 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4221 * 4222 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4223 */ 4224 static inline 4225 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4226 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4227 { 4228 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4229 } 4230 4231 /** 4232 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4233 * 4234 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4235 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4236 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4237 * 4238 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4239 * 4240 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4241 */ 4242 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4243 4244 /** 4245 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4246 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4247 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4248 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4249 */ 4250 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4251 int throughput; 4252 int blink_time; 4253 }; 4254 4255 /** 4256 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4257 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4258 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4259 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4260 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4261 */ 4262 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4263 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4264 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4265 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4266 }; 4267 4268 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4269 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4270 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4271 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4272 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4273 const char * 4274 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4275 unsigned int flags, 4276 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4277 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4278 #endif 4279 /** 4280 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4281 * 4282 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4283 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4284 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4285 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4286 * 4287 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4288 * 4289 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4290 */ 4291 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4292 { 4293 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4294 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4295 #else 4296 return NULL; 4297 #endif 4298 } 4299 4300 /** 4301 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4302 * 4303 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4304 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4305 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4306 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4307 * 4308 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4309 * 4310 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4311 */ 4312 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4313 { 4314 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4315 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4316 #else 4317 return NULL; 4318 #endif 4319 } 4320 4321 /** 4322 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4323 * 4324 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4325 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4326 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4327 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4328 * 4329 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4330 * 4331 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4332 */ 4333 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4334 { 4335 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4336 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4337 #else 4338 return NULL; 4339 #endif 4340 } 4341 4342 /** 4343 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4344 * 4345 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4346 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4347 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4348 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4349 * 4350 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4351 * 4352 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4353 */ 4354 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4355 { 4356 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4357 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4358 #else 4359 return NULL; 4360 #endif 4361 } 4362 4363 /** 4364 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4365 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4366 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4367 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4368 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4369 * 4370 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4371 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4372 * 4373 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4374 */ 4375 static inline const char * 4376 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4377 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4378 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4379 { 4380 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4381 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4382 blink_table_len); 4383 #else 4384 return NULL; 4385 #endif 4386 } 4387 4388 /** 4389 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4390 * 4391 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4392 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4393 * 4394 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4395 */ 4396 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4397 4398 /** 4399 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4400 * 4401 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4402 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4403 * before calling this function. 4404 * 4405 * @hw: the hardware to free 4406 */ 4407 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4408 4409 /** 4410 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4411 * 4412 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4413 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4414 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4415 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4416 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4417 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4418 * 4419 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4420 */ 4421 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4422 4423 /** 4424 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 4425 * 4426 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4427 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4428 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4429 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4430 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4431 * 4432 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4433 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4434 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4435 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4436 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4437 * 4438 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 4439 * 4440 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4441 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4442 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4443 * @list: the destination list 4444 */ 4445 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4446 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 4447 4448 /** 4449 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4450 * 4451 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4452 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4453 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4454 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4455 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4456 * 4457 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4458 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4459 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4460 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4461 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4462 * 4463 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4464 * 4465 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4466 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4467 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4468 * @napi: the NAPI context 4469 */ 4470 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4471 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4472 4473 /** 4474 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4475 * 4476 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4477 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4478 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4479 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4480 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4481 * 4482 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4483 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4484 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4485 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4486 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4487 * 4488 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4489 * 4490 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4491 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4492 */ 4493 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4494 { 4495 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4496 } 4497 4498 /** 4499 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4500 * 4501 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4502 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4503 * 4504 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4505 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4506 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4507 * 4508 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4509 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4510 */ 4511 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4512 4513 /** 4514 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4515 * 4516 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4517 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4518 * 4519 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4520 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4521 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4522 * 4523 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4524 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4525 */ 4526 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4527 struct sk_buff *skb) 4528 { 4529 local_bh_disable(); 4530 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4531 local_bh_enable(); 4532 } 4533 4534 /** 4535 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4536 * 4537 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4538 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4539 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4540 * 4541 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4542 * 4543 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4544 * each other. 4545 * 4546 * @sta: currently connected sta 4547 * @start: start or stop PS 4548 * 4549 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4550 */ 4551 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4552 4553 /** 4554 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4555 * (in process context) 4556 * 4557 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4558 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4559 * applies. 4560 * 4561 * @sta: currently connected sta 4562 * @start: start or stop PS 4563 * 4564 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4565 */ 4566 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4567 bool start) 4568 { 4569 int ret; 4570 4571 local_bh_disable(); 4572 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4573 local_bh_enable(); 4574 4575 return ret; 4576 } 4577 4578 /** 4579 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 4580 * @sta: currently connected station 4581 * 4582 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4583 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 4584 * connected station was received. 4585 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4586 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 4587 * be serialized. 4588 */ 4589 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4590 4591 /** 4592 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 4593 * @sta: currently connected station 4594 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 4595 * 4596 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4597 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 4598 * from a connected station was received. 4599 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4600 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 4601 * serialized. 4602 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 4603 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 4604 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 4605 * checks. 4606 */ 4607 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 4608 4609 /* 4610 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 4611 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 4612 */ 4613 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 4614 4615 /** 4616 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 4617 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 4618 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 4619 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 4620 * 4621 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 4622 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 4623 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 4624 * 4625 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 4626 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 4627 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 4628 * call! Beware of the locking!) 4629 * 4630 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 4631 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 4632 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 4633 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 4634 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 4635 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 4636 * 4637 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 4638 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 4639 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 4640 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 4641 * use this API. 4642 */ 4643 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4644 u8 tid, bool buffered); 4645 4646 /** 4647 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 4648 * 4649 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 4650 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 4651 * rate selection table for the station entry. 4652 * 4653 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4654 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 4655 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 4656 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 4657 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 4658 */ 4659 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4660 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4661 struct sk_buff *skb, 4662 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 4663 int max_rates); 4664 4665 /** 4666 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 4667 * 4668 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 4669 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 4670 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 4671 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 4672 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 4673 * slow stations to starve). 4674 * 4675 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 4676 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 4677 */ 4678 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4679 u32 thr); 4680 4681 /** 4682 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 4683 * 4684 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 4685 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 4686 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 4687 * 4688 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4689 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 4690 * @info: tx status information 4691 */ 4692 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4693 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4694 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 4695 4696 /** 4697 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 4698 * 4699 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 4700 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 4701 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 4702 * 4703 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4704 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 4705 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 4706 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4707 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4708 * 4709 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4710 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4711 */ 4712 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4713 struct sk_buff *skb); 4714 4715 /** 4716 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 4717 * 4718 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4719 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 4720 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 4721 * 4722 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4723 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4724 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4725 * 4726 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4727 * @status: tx status information 4728 */ 4729 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4730 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 4731 4732 /** 4733 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 4734 * 4735 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4736 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 4737 * specific skbs. 4738 * 4739 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4740 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4741 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4742 * 4743 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4744 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 4745 * (NULL for multicast packets) 4746 * @info: tx status information 4747 */ 4748 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4749 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4750 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 4751 { 4752 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 4753 .sta = sta, 4754 .info = info, 4755 }; 4756 4757 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 4758 } 4759 4760 /** 4761 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 4762 * 4763 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 4764 * 4765 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4766 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 4767 * for a single hardware. 4768 * 4769 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4770 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4771 */ 4772 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4773 struct sk_buff *skb) 4774 { 4775 local_bh_disable(); 4776 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 4777 local_bh_enable(); 4778 } 4779 4780 /** 4781 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 4782 * 4783 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 4784 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4785 * 4786 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4787 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4788 * 4789 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4790 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4791 */ 4792 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4793 struct sk_buff *skb); 4794 4795 /** 4796 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format 4797 * 4798 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit 4799 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which 4800 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap 4801 * 802.11 frames. 4802 * 4803 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4804 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all 4805 * calls in the same tx status family. 4806 * 4807 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4808 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted 4809 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4810 */ 4811 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4812 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4813 struct sk_buff *skb); 4814 4815 /** 4816 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 4817 * 4818 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 4819 * connected STA. 4820 * 4821 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 4822 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 4823 */ 4824 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 4825 4826 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 4827 4828 /** 4829 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 4830 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 4831 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 4832 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 4833 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 4834 * should be ignored. 4835 */ 4836 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 4837 u16 tim_offset; 4838 u16 tim_length; 4839 4840 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 4841 }; 4842 4843 /** 4844 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 4845 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4846 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4847 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 4848 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 4849 * 4850 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4851 * obtain the beacon template. 4852 * 4853 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 4854 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 4855 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 4856 * applicable, the CSA count. 4857 * 4858 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4859 * 4860 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4861 */ 4862 struct sk_buff * 4863 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4864 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4865 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs); 4866 4867 /** 4868 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 4869 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4870 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4871 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 4872 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4873 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 4874 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 4875 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4876 * 4877 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4878 * obtain the beacon frame. 4879 * 4880 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 4881 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 4882 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 4883 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 4884 * 4885 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4886 * 4887 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4888 */ 4889 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4890 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4891 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length); 4892 4893 /** 4894 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 4895 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4896 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4897 * 4898 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4899 * 4900 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4901 */ 4902 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4903 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 4904 { 4905 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL); 4906 } 4907 4908 /** 4909 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 4910 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4911 * 4912 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 4913 * This function is called implicitly when 4914 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 4915 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 4916 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 4917 * 4918 * Return: new countdown value 4919 */ 4920 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4921 4922 /** 4923 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 4924 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4925 * @counter: the new value for the counter 4926 * 4927 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 4928 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 4929 * 4930 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 4931 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 4932 */ 4933 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 4934 4935 /** 4936 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 4937 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4938 * 4939 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 4940 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 4941 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 4942 */ 4943 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4944 4945 /** 4946 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 4947 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4948 * 4949 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero. 4950 */ 4951 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4952 4953 /** 4954 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 4955 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4956 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4957 * 4958 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 4959 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 4960 * 4961 * Can only be called in AP mode. 4962 * 4963 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 4964 */ 4965 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4966 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4967 4968 /** 4969 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 4970 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4971 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4972 * 4973 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 4974 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 4975 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 4976 * 4977 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 4978 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 4979 * 4980 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 4981 */ 4982 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4983 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4984 4985 /** 4986 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 4987 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4988 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4989 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 4990 * if at all possible 4991 * 4992 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 4993 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 4994 * BSSID and address is used. 4995 * 4996 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 4997 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 4998 * 4999 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5000 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5001 * 5002 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5003 */ 5004 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5005 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5006 bool qos_ok); 5007 5008 /** 5009 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5010 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5011 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5012 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5013 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5014 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5015 * 5016 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5017 * hardware. 5018 * 5019 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5020 */ 5021 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5022 const u8 *src_addr, 5023 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5024 size_t tailroom); 5025 5026 /** 5027 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5028 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5029 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5030 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5031 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5032 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5033 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5034 * 5035 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5036 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5037 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5038 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5039 */ 5040 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5041 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5042 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5043 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5044 5045 /** 5046 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5047 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5048 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5049 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5050 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5051 * 5052 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5053 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5054 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5055 * 5056 * Return: The duration. 5057 */ 5058 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5059 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5060 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5061 5062 /** 5063 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5064 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5065 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5066 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5067 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5068 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5069 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5070 * 5071 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5072 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5073 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5074 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5075 */ 5076 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5077 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5078 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5079 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5080 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5081 5082 /** 5083 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5084 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5085 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5086 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5087 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5088 * 5089 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5090 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5091 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5092 * 5093 * Return: The duration. 5094 */ 5095 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5096 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5097 size_t frame_len, 5098 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5099 5100 /** 5101 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5102 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5103 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5104 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5105 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5106 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5107 * 5108 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5109 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5110 * 5111 * Return: The duration. 5112 */ 5113 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5114 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5115 enum nl80211_band band, 5116 size_t frame_len, 5117 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5118 5119 /** 5120 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5121 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5122 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5123 * 5124 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5125 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5126 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5127 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5128 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5129 * 5130 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5131 * frames are available. 5132 * 5133 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5134 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5135 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5136 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5137 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5138 * use common code for all beacons. 5139 */ 5140 struct sk_buff * 5141 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5142 5143 /** 5144 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5145 * 5146 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5147 * 5148 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5149 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5150 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5151 */ 5152 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5153 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5154 5155 /** 5156 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5157 * 5158 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5159 * from the given packet. 5160 * 5161 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5162 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5163 * with this P1K 5164 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5165 */ 5166 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5167 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5168 { 5169 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5170 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5171 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5172 5173 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5174 } 5175 5176 /** 5177 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5178 * 5179 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5180 * and transmitter address. 5181 * 5182 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5183 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5184 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5185 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5186 */ 5187 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5188 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5189 5190 /** 5191 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5192 * 5193 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5194 * in the packet. 5195 * 5196 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5197 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5198 * encrypted with this key 5199 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5200 */ 5201 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5202 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5203 5204 /** 5205 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5206 * 5207 * @pos: start of crypto header 5208 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5209 * @pn: PN to add 5210 * 5211 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5212 * the packet payload) 5213 * 5214 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5215 * point to the crypto header) 5216 */ 5217 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5218 5219 /** 5220 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5221 * 5222 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5223 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5224 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5225 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5226 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5227 * 5228 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5229 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5230 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5231 * 5232 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5233 * can be done concurrently. 5234 */ 5235 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5236 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5237 5238 /** 5239 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5240 * 5241 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5242 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5243 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5244 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5245 * @seq: new sequence data 5246 * 5247 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5248 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5249 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5250 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5251 * 5252 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5253 * can be done concurrently. 5254 */ 5255 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5256 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5257 5258 /** 5259 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5260 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5261 * 5262 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5263 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5264 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5265 * 5266 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5267 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5268 */ 5269 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5270 5271 /** 5272 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5273 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5274 * @keyconf: new key data 5275 * 5276 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5277 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5278 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5279 * 5280 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5281 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5282 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5283 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5284 * 5285 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5286 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5287 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5288 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5289 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5290 * of the reconfiguration. 5291 * 5292 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5293 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5294 * 5295 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5296 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5297 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5298 * the key that's being replaced. 5299 */ 5300 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5301 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5302 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5303 5304 /** 5305 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5306 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5307 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5308 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5309 * @gfp: allocation flags 5310 */ 5311 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5312 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5313 5314 /** 5315 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5316 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5317 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5318 * 5319 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5320 */ 5321 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5322 5323 /** 5324 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5325 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5326 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5327 * 5328 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5329 */ 5330 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5331 5332 /** 5333 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5334 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5335 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5336 * 5337 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5338 * 5339 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5340 */ 5341 5342 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5343 5344 /** 5345 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5346 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5347 * 5348 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5349 */ 5350 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5351 5352 /** 5353 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5354 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5355 * 5356 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5357 */ 5358 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5359 5360 /** 5361 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5362 * 5363 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5364 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5365 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5366 * any context, including hardirq context. 5367 * 5368 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5369 * @info: information about the completed scan 5370 */ 5371 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5372 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5373 5374 /** 5375 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5376 * 5377 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5378 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5379 * 5380 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5381 */ 5382 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5383 5384 /** 5385 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5386 * 5387 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5388 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5389 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5390 * while associating, for instance. 5391 * 5392 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5393 */ 5394 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5395 5396 /** 5397 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5398 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5399 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5400 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5401 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5402 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5403 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5404 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5405 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5406 */ 5407 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5408 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5409 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5410 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5411 }; 5412 5413 /** 5414 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5415 * 5416 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5417 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5418 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5419 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5420 * 5421 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5422 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5423 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5424 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5425 */ 5426 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5427 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5428 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5429 void *data); 5430 5431 /** 5432 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5433 * 5434 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5435 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5436 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5437 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5438 * be used. 5439 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5440 * 5441 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5442 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5443 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5444 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5445 */ 5446 static inline void 5447 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5448 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5449 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5450 void *data) 5451 { 5452 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5453 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5454 iterator, data); 5455 } 5456 5457 /** 5458 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5459 * 5460 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5461 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5462 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5463 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5464 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5465 * 5466 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5467 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5468 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5469 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5470 */ 5471 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5472 u32 iter_flags, 5473 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5474 u8 *mac, 5475 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5476 void *data); 5477 5478 /** 5479 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces 5480 * 5481 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5482 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5483 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL. 5484 * 5485 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5486 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5487 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5488 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5489 */ 5490 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5491 u32 iter_flags, 5492 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5493 u8 *mac, 5494 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5495 void *data); 5496 5497 /** 5498 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 5499 * 5500 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5501 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5502 * function for them. 5503 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5504 * 5505 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5506 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5507 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5508 */ 5509 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5510 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5511 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5512 void *data); 5513 /** 5514 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5515 * 5516 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 5517 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 5518 * 5519 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5520 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 5521 */ 5522 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 5523 5524 /** 5525 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5526 * 5527 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 5528 * workqueue. 5529 * 5530 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5531 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 5532 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 5533 */ 5534 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5535 struct delayed_work *dwork, 5536 unsigned long delay); 5537 5538 /** 5539 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 5540 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 5541 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5542 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 5543 * 5544 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 5545 * 5546 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5547 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5548 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5549 */ 5550 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 5551 u16 timeout); 5552 5553 /** 5554 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 5555 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5556 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5557 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5558 * 5559 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5560 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 5561 * from any context. 5562 */ 5563 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5564 u16 tid); 5565 5566 /** 5567 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 5568 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 5569 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 5570 * 5571 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 5572 * 5573 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5574 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5575 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5576 */ 5577 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 5578 5579 /** 5580 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 5581 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5582 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5583 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 5584 * 5585 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5586 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 5587 * can be called from any context. 5588 */ 5589 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5590 u16 tid); 5591 5592 /** 5593 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 5594 * 5595 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 5596 * @addr: station's address 5597 * 5598 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5599 * 5600 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5601 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5602 */ 5603 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5604 const u8 *addr); 5605 5606 /** 5607 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 5608 * 5609 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5610 * @addr: remote station's address 5611 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 5612 * 5613 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5614 * 5615 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5616 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5617 * 5618 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 5619 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 5620 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 5621 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 5622 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 5623 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 5624 * is not reliable. 5625 * 5626 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 5627 */ 5628 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5629 const u8 *addr, 5630 const u8 *localaddr); 5631 5632 /** 5633 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 5634 * @hw: the hardware 5635 * @pubsta: the station 5636 * @block: whether to block or unblock 5637 * 5638 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 5639 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 5640 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 5641 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 5642 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 5643 * 5644 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 5645 * manner. 5646 * 5647 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 5648 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 5649 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 5650 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 5651 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 5652 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 5653 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 5654 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 5655 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 5656 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 5657 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 5658 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 5659 * woke up while blocked or not. 5660 */ 5661 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5662 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 5663 5664 /** 5665 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 5666 * @pubsta: the station 5667 * 5668 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 5669 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 5670 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 5671 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 5672 * 5673 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 5674 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 5675 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 5676 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 5677 * 5678 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 5679 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 5680 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 5681 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 5682 */ 5683 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 5684 5685 /** 5686 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 5687 * @pubsta: the station 5688 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 5689 * 5690 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 5691 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 5692 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 5693 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 5694 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 5695 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 5696 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 5697 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 5698 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 5699 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 5700 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 5701 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 5702 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 5703 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 5704 */ 5705 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 5706 5707 /** 5708 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 5709 * 5710 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 5711 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 5712 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 5713 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 5714 * 5715 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 5716 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 5717 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 5718 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 5719 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 5720 * attempts. 5721 * 5722 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 5723 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 5724 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 5725 * them to 0. 5726 * 5727 * @pubsta: the station 5728 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 5729 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 5730 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 5731 */ 5732 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 5733 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 5734 5735 /** 5736 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 5737 * 5738 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5739 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 5740 * 5741 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 5742 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 5743 */ 5744 bool 5745 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 5746 5747 /** 5748 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 5749 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5750 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5751 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5752 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5753 * 5754 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5755 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5756 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 5757 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 5758 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 5759 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 5760 * 5761 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 5762 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 5763 * set_key callback. 5764 */ 5765 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5766 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5767 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5768 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5769 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5770 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5771 void *data), 5772 void *iter_data); 5773 5774 /** 5775 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 5776 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5777 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5778 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5779 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5780 * 5781 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5782 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5783 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 5784 * in removal process will be skipped. 5785 * 5786 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 5787 * and thus iter must be atomic. 5788 */ 5789 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5790 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5791 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5792 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5793 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5794 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5795 void *data), 5796 void *iter_data); 5797 5798 /** 5799 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 5800 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5801 * @iter: iterator function 5802 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 5803 * 5804 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 5805 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 5806 * places while calling into the driver. 5807 * 5808 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 5809 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 5810 * removed. 5811 * 5812 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 5813 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 5814 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 5815 * or not. 5816 */ 5817 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 5818 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5819 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5820 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 5821 void *data), 5822 void *iter_data); 5823 5824 /** 5825 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5826 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5827 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5828 * 5829 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5830 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 5831 * information. This function must only be called from within the 5832 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 5833 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 5834 * %NULL. 5835 * 5836 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5837 */ 5838 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5839 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5840 5841 /** 5842 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 5843 * 5844 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5845 * 5846 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 5847 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 5848 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 5849 */ 5850 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5851 5852 /** 5853 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 5854 * 5855 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5856 * 5857 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 5858 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 5859 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 5860 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 5861 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 5862 * 5863 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 5864 * without connection recovery attempts. 5865 */ 5866 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5867 5868 /** 5869 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 5870 * 5871 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5872 * 5873 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 5874 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 5875 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 5876 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 5877 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 5878 * 5879 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 5880 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 5881 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 5882 * disconnect normally later. 5883 * 5884 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 5885 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 5886 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 5887 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 5888 */ 5889 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5890 5891 /** 5892 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 5893 * rssi threshold triggered 5894 * 5895 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5896 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 5897 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 5898 * @gfp: context flags 5899 * 5900 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 5901 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 5902 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 5903 */ 5904 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5905 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 5906 s32 rssi_level, 5907 gfp_t gfp); 5908 5909 /** 5910 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 5911 * 5912 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5913 * @gfp: context flags 5914 */ 5915 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 5916 5917 /** 5918 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 5919 * 5920 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5921 */ 5922 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5923 5924 /** 5925 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 5926 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5927 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 5928 * 5929 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 5930 * and wake up the suspended queues. 5931 */ 5932 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 5933 5934 /** 5935 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 5936 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5937 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 5938 * 5939 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 5940 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 5941 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 5942 */ 5943 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5944 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 5945 5946 /** 5947 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 5948 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5949 */ 5950 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5951 5952 /** 5953 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 5954 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5955 */ 5956 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5957 5958 /** 5959 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 5960 * 5961 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 5962 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 5963 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 5964 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 5965 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 5966 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 5967 * 5968 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5969 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 5970 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 5971 */ 5972 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 5973 const u8 *addr); 5974 5975 /** 5976 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 5977 * @pubsta: station struct 5978 * @tid: the session's TID 5979 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 5980 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 5981 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 5982 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 5983 * 5984 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 5985 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 5986 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 5987 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 5988 */ 5989 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 5990 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 5991 u16 received_mpdus); 5992 5993 /** 5994 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 5995 * 5996 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 5997 * buffer. 5998 * 5999 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6000 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6001 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6002 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6003 */ 6004 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6005 6006 /** 6007 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6008 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6009 * @addr: station mac address 6010 * @tid: the rx tid 6011 */ 6012 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6013 unsigned int tid); 6014 6015 /** 6016 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6017 * 6018 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6019 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6020 * reordering. 6021 * 6022 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6023 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6024 * 6025 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6026 * @addr: station mac address 6027 * @tid: the rx tid 6028 */ 6029 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6030 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6031 { 6032 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6033 return; 6034 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6035 } 6036 6037 /** 6038 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6039 * 6040 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6041 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6042 * reordering. 6043 * 6044 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6045 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6046 * 6047 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6048 * @addr: station mac address 6049 * @tid: the rx tid 6050 */ 6051 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6052 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6053 { 6054 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6055 return; 6056 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6057 } 6058 6059 /** 6060 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6061 * 6062 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6063 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6064 * 6065 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6066 * 6067 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6068 * @addr: station mac address 6069 * @tid: the rx tid 6070 */ 6071 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6072 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6073 6074 /* Rate control API */ 6075 6076 /** 6077 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6078 * 6079 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6080 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6081 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6082 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6083 * to be filled in 6084 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6085 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6086 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6087 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6088 * RTS threshold 6089 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6090 * if the selected rate supports it 6091 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6092 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6093 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6094 */ 6095 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6096 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6097 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6098 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6099 struct sk_buff *skb; 6100 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6101 bool rts, short_preamble; 6102 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6103 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6104 bool bss; 6105 }; 6106 6107 /** 6108 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6109 */ 6110 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6111 /** 6112 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6113 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6114 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6115 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6116 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6117 */ 6118 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6119 }; 6120 6121 struct rate_control_ops { 6122 unsigned long capa; 6123 const char *name; 6124 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6125 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 6126 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6127 void (*free)(void *priv); 6128 6129 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6130 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6131 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6132 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6133 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6134 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6135 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6136 u32 changed); 6137 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6138 void *priv_sta); 6139 6140 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6141 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6142 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6143 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6144 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6145 struct sk_buff *skb); 6146 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6147 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6148 6149 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6150 struct dentry *dir); 6151 6152 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6153 }; 6154 6155 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6156 enum nl80211_band band, 6157 int index) 6158 { 6159 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6160 } 6161 6162 static inline s8 6163 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6164 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6165 { 6166 int i; 6167 6168 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6169 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6170 return i; 6171 6172 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6173 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6174 6175 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6176 return 0; 6177 } 6178 6179 static inline 6180 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6181 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6182 { 6183 unsigned int i; 6184 6185 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6186 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6187 return true; 6188 return false; 6189 } 6190 6191 /** 6192 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6193 * 6194 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6195 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6196 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6197 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6198 * 6199 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6200 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6201 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6202 */ 6203 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6204 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6205 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6206 6207 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6208 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6209 6210 static inline bool 6211 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6212 { 6213 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6214 } 6215 6216 static inline bool 6217 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6218 { 6219 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6220 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6221 } 6222 6223 static inline bool 6224 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6225 { 6226 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6227 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6228 } 6229 6230 static inline bool 6231 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6232 { 6233 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6234 } 6235 6236 static inline bool 6237 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6238 { 6239 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6240 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6241 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6242 } 6243 6244 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6245 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6246 { 6247 if (p2p) { 6248 switch (type) { 6249 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6250 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6251 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6252 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6253 default: 6254 break; 6255 } 6256 } 6257 return type; 6258 } 6259 6260 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6261 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6262 { 6263 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6264 } 6265 6266 /** 6267 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6268 * 6269 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6270 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6271 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6272 * 6273 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6274 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6275 * matching GroupId management frame. 6276 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6277 */ 6278 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6279 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6280 6281 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6282 int rssi_min_thold, 6283 int rssi_max_thold); 6284 6285 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6286 6287 /** 6288 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6289 * 6290 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6291 * 6292 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6293 * 6294 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6295 * applicable. 6296 */ 6297 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6298 6299 /** 6300 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6301 * @vif: virtual interface 6302 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6303 * @gfp: allocation flags 6304 * 6305 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6306 */ 6307 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6308 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6309 gfp_t gfp); 6310 6311 /** 6312 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6313 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6314 * @vif: virtual interface 6315 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6316 * @band: the band to transmit on 6317 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6318 * 6319 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6320 */ 6321 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6322 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6323 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6324 6325 /** 6326 * Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header of injected frames 6327 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 6328 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 6329 */ 6330 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 6331 struct net_device *dev); 6332 6333 /** 6334 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6335 * 6336 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6337 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6338 * 6339 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6340 * 6341 * private: 6342 * 6343 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6344 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6345 */ 6346 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6347 u32 next_tsf; 6348 bool has_next_tsf; 6349 6350 u8 absent; 6351 6352 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6353 struct { 6354 u32 start; 6355 u32 duration; 6356 u32 interval; 6357 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6358 }; 6359 6360 /** 6361 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6362 * 6363 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6364 * @data: NoA tracking data 6365 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6366 * 6367 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6368 */ 6369 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6370 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6371 6372 /** 6373 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6374 * 6375 * @data: NoA tracking data 6376 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6377 */ 6378 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6379 6380 /** 6381 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6382 * @vif: virtual interface 6383 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6384 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6385 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6386 * @gfp: allocation flags 6387 * 6388 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6389 */ 6390 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6391 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6392 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6393 6394 /** 6395 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 6396 * 6397 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 6398 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 6399 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 6400 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 6401 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 6402 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 6403 * 6404 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 6405 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 6406 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6407 * 6408 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 6409 * @tid: the TID to reserve 6410 * 6411 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 6412 */ 6413 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6414 6415 /** 6416 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 6417 * 6418 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 6419 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 6420 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 6421 * 6422 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 6423 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 6424 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6425 * 6426 * @sta: the station 6427 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 6428 */ 6429 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6430 6431 /** 6432 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6433 * 6434 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6435 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6436 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6437 * 6438 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 6439 * 6440 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 6441 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 6442 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 6443 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 6444 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 6445 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 6446 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 6447 * 6448 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 6449 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 6450 */ 6451 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6452 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6453 6454 /** 6455 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6456 * (in process context) 6457 * 6458 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 6459 * (internally disables bottom halves). 6460 * 6461 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6462 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6463 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6464 */ 6465 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6466 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6467 { 6468 struct sk_buff *skb; 6469 6470 local_bh_disable(); 6471 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 6472 local_bh_enable(); 6473 6474 return skb; 6475 } 6476 6477 /** 6478 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 6479 * 6480 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6481 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 6482 * 6483 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 6484 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 6485 * driver has finished scheduling it. 6486 */ 6487 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6488 6489 /** 6490 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 6491 * 6492 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6493 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 6494 * 6495 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 6496 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 6497 */ 6498 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6499 6500 /* (deprecated) */ 6501 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 6502 { 6503 } 6504 6505 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6506 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 6507 6508 /** 6509 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 6510 * 6511 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6512 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6513 * 6514 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 6515 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 6516 * 6517 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 6518 * this TXQ internally. 6519 */ 6520 static inline void 6521 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6522 { 6523 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 6524 } 6525 6526 /** 6527 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 6528 * 6529 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6530 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6531 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 6532 * 6533 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 6534 * internally. 6535 */ 6536 static inline void 6537 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6538 bool force) 6539 { 6540 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 6541 } 6542 6543 /** 6544 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 6545 * 6546 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 6547 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 6548 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 6549 * next_txq(). 6550 * 6551 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 6552 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 6553 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 6554 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 6555 * again. 6556 * 6557 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 6558 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 6559 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 6560 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 6561 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 6562 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 6563 * 6564 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6565 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6566 */ 6567 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6568 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6569 6570 /** 6571 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 6572 * 6573 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 6574 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 6575 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 6576 * 6577 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6578 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 6579 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 6580 */ 6581 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6582 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 6583 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 6584 6585 /** 6586 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 6587 * 6588 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 6589 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6590 * 6591 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6592 * @inst_id: the local instance id 6593 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 6594 * @gfp: allocation flags 6595 */ 6596 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6597 u8 inst_id, 6598 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 6599 gfp_t gfp); 6600 6601 /** 6602 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 6603 * 6604 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 6605 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 6606 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6607 * 6608 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6609 * @match: match event information 6610 * @gfp: allocation flags 6611 */ 6612 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6613 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 6614 gfp_t gfp); 6615 6616 /** 6617 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 6618 * 6619 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6620 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 6621 * 6622 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6623 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 6624 * information. 6625 * @len: frame length in bytes 6626 */ 6627 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6628 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 6629 int len); 6630 6631 /** 6632 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 6633 * 6634 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6635 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 6636 * 6637 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6638 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6639 * @len: frame length in bytes 6640 */ 6641 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6642 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 6643 int len); 6644 /** 6645 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 6646 * 6647 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 6648 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 6649 * hardware or firmware. 6650 * 6651 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6652 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 6653 */ 6654 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 6655 6656 /** 6657 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 6658 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6659 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6660 * 6661 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 6662 * 6663 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 6664 */ 6665 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6666 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6667 6668 /** 6669 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 6670 * probe response template. 6671 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6672 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6673 * 6674 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 6675 * 6676 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 6677 */ 6678 struct sk_buff * 6679 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6680 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6681 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 6682